Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW X1.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance .................................................................................................. 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 49
General settings ............................................................................................................. 52
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 64
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ............................................................................ 91
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 102
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 107
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 129
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 145
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 150
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 171
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 177
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 197
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 206
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 217
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 224
Loading .......................................................................................................................... 228
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 231
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 240
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 242
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 244
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 262
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 265
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 269
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 271
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 273
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 283
Care ................................................................................................................................. 289
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 296
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 298
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 300
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/18, 03 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication, see Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver's Guide app.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
lar topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information on
BMW, for example on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Additional
information, refer to page 64.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
and tablets. Additional information, refer to
page 65.
Online Owner's Manual
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 66.
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐
let points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Vehicle features and
options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in your vehicle, for example because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described in
this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the fea‐
tures and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the
vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements
applying in the country of first delivery, also
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the
homologation requirements in a certain country
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
quires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, BMW recommends
use of a facility that performs work, for instance
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐
ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65
Warning
California law requires vehicle manufacturers
provide the following warning:
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
water. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐
hicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
tions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
mologation requirements. You should also be
aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Some of these are necessary for the vehi‐
cle to function safely or provide assistance dur‐
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate
comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or permanently
store information about the condition of the vehi‐
cle, component load, maintenance requirements,
technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery
status.
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
ment of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐
ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the
vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐
tions. The majority of this data is transient and is
only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a
small proportion of the data is stored in event or
fault memories and, if needed, in the vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number. A dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop can read out the information. The socket
for OBD Onboard Diagnosis required by law in
the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data
is collected, processed, and used by the relevant
organizations in the service network. The data
documents the technical conditions of the vehi‐
cle, helps in locating faults and improving quality,
and is transferred to the vehicle manufacturer, if
needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
reset when a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop performs
repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the vehi‐
cle by means of the service history and transfer‐
red to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred to
the vehicle manufacturer. This objection applies
for as long as the vehicle owner remains the pro‐
prietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some data
can be transferred into the vehicle when using
comfort and infotainment functions, for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music or movies for
playback in an integrated multimedia system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is
found on a device that has been connected to
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings selected
for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing comfort and individual settings can be stored
in the vehicle and modified at any time, for in‐
stance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in the
car's interior.
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device at
the same time. Depending on the type of con‐
nection, this includes, for instance position data
and other general vehicle information. This opti‐
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in‐
stance navigation or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data. How the data will be
processed further is determined by the provider
of the particular app being used. The extent of
the possible settings depends on the respective
app and the operating system of the mobile de‐
vice.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
phones. This wireless network connection
enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
clude online services and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any col‐
lection, processing, and use of personal data
above and beyond that needed to provide the
services must always be based on a legal per‐
mission, contractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infrastruc‐
ture and how the infotainment system is used.
This information cannot be traced back to indi‐
vidual vehicles or people. Evaluating the data en‐
ables the manufacturer to further improve its
products or services, for instance by incorporat‐
ing the most up-to-date traffic bulletins. The data
transfer feature can be deactivated in the vehicle.
Certain services and functions, some of which
are subject to a charge, can be deactivated by
the driver. It is also possible to activate or deacti‐
vate the data connection as a whole. That is, with
the exception of functions and services required
by law such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other providers,
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
changed during this process. Information on the
way in which personal data is collected and used
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 57.
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 15
Information
NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance ............................................................................... 18
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Your BMW at a glance
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button of the remote control again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking
Press button.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.
With automatic tailgate operation:
opening and closing the tailgate
with no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Tailgate
Opening
▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on
the tailgate.
▷ If carrying the remote control, press the but‐
ton on the tailgate.
Seite 19
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
Closing
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
gate.
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Adjusting the steering wheel
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering
wheel.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
Displays and control
elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Light switch element
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Washer/wiper system
5 Start/Stop button
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or the ignition is switched on.
Seite 21
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driver's door
1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors
4 Opening/closing the tailgate
Switch console
1 Selector lever
2 Controller
3 Parking brake
4 Driver assistance systems
5 Driving Dynamics Control
iDrive
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›Help with voice activation‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
mirror.
Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Ignition on/off
▷ On: press the Start/Stop but‐
ton.
Most of the indicator/warning
lights light up for a varied
length of time.
▷ Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out.
▷ Radio-ready state: when the ignition is
switched off, press the ON/OFF button on
the radio or when the engine is running, press
the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
Starting/stopping the engine
Steptronic transmission: starting
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission: switching off
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Auto Start/Stop function
Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off
automatically while stationary to save fuel. The
engine starts automatically when the brake pedal
is released.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Steptronic transmission: press the switch
while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐
tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission
Selector lever positions
Parking position P.
Reverse R.
Neutral N.
Drive mode D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seite 23
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Selector lever lock
A lock prevents an inadvertent change from se‐
lector lever position P to another selector lever
position and, depending on the transmission ver‐
sion, inadvertent switching to selector lever posi‐
tion P or R.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de‐
pressed, press the button on the front or side of
the selector lever.
Steptronic transmission, Sport
and manual mode
Sport program:
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
High beams, headlight flasher,
turn signal, roadside parking
light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Turn signal
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.
▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
in the opposite direction.
▷ Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Canada: roadside parking light
Illuminate the vehicle on one side.
▷ On: with the ignition switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and
brief wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Seite 25
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Adjusting the sensitivity:
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield and
headlights
Pull the lever.
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its intermittent position when released.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Canada: wiper systemWiper
system
Switching the wipers on/off and
brief wipe
Switching on
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Push wiper lever down.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Adjusting the sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield and
headlights
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Seite 27
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its intermittent position when released.
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Recirculated-air mode
Button Function
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode/AUC.
Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
SYNC program.
Defrost and defog window.
Rear window defroster.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Button Function
Seat heating.
Switch off the system.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Waveband/satellite radio
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Depending on the vehicle equipment: eject‐
ing a CD/DVD
5 Depending on the vehicle equipment:
CD/DVD drive
6 Change station/track
7 Programmable memory buttons
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Move the Controller to the right to select the
state from the list.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/city
1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destination
guidance is started to the town/city center.
Connecting a mobile phone
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐
structions.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Seite 29
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will appear
at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via iDrive or the
button on the steering wheel.
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press button.
Dialing a number
1.
"Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
If connection is to be set up via the additional
phone:
1.
Press button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Refueling
Refueling
Fuel cap
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐
allic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade can
be found in the Owner's Manual.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure values can be found
on the sign on the door pillar.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip,
the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is dis‐
played.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle
before engine oil is added.
Adding
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
sage.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Seite 31
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the clock in
many countries.
Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established with Road‐
side Assistance.
Warning triangle, first-aid kit
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate. Move the warning triangle sideways
and remove it.
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area on
the left in the storage compartment.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
Seite 32
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
Seite 33
Your BMW at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 49
General settings ......................................................................................... 52
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 64
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Cockpit
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 88
2 Power windows 87
3 Exterior mirror operation 99
4 Central locking system
Unlock 75
Lock 75
5 Lights
Front fog lights 148
Light switch 145
Lights off
Daytime running lights 147
Parking lights 145
Low beams 145
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Automatic headlight control 146
Cornering light 147
High-beam Assistant 147
Instrument lighting 148
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 113
High beams, headlight flasher 113
High-beam Assistant 147
Roadside parking lights 146
Onboard Computer 138
7 Shift paddles 121
8 Instrument cluster 129
9 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 113
Wiper on Canadian models 117
Rain sensor 114
Rain sensor on Canadian mod‐
els 118
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 115
Rear window wiper in Canadian
models 119
Rear window wiper 116
Clean the rear window 116
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 108
Auto Start/Stop function 109
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 49
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Thumbwheel for selection lists 138
12 Horn, entire surface
13 Heated steering wheel 101
14 Adjust steering wheel 101
15 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 183
Active Cruise Control on/off 177
Cruise control: store speed
Pausing, continuing cruise control
Camera-based cruise control: re‐
duce distance
Camera-based cruise control: in‐
crease distance
Cruise control rocker switch
Seite 37
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
16 Unlock hood 263 17 Open the tailgate 79
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 40
2 Ventilation 203
3 Hazard warning system 283
Intelligent Safety 160
4 Radio/Multimedia
5 Glove compartment 218
6 Climate control 197
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 121
8 Controller with buttons 41
9 Parking brake 111
10 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 171
Driving Dynamics Control 175
PDC Park Distance Control 186
Rearview camera 189
Parking assistant 192
HDC Hill Descent Control 173
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
iDrive
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending
on the equipment version
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 292.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 45.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 41
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Controller without navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in two directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.
Operating with the
Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's
Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
A white arrow indicates that additional displays
can be called up.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
Controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
Seite 43
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower
case, numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters and
numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
played on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adapting the main menu
1.
Tap on symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Menu items in the Owner's
Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
A white arrow indicates that additional displays
can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left,
until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter
or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower
case, numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Seite 45
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Selecting functions
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
lowing:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to change
between upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 43.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
ler.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in several
menus on the right side of the split screen, for in‐
stance information from the Onboard Computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where the
split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of
displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Online Entertainment.
WiFi.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Seite 47
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐
structions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system so
that the spoken commands can be identified.
To set the language, refer to page 52.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation
system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Using a smartphone via voice
activation
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Seite 49
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
2.
Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list en‐
tries via voice activation. Read these list entries
out loud exactly as they are shown in the respec‐
tive list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation
system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›Help with voice activation‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can be
selected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating voice recognition via
the server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
vides a dictation function and a natural method of
entering destinations while improving the quality
of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider and locally
stored there.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 283,
close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Seite 51
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
General settings
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer
to page 50.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE
General settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, fuel consumption, distances
and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current
vehicle position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 53
General settings
AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screensaver
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensaver
will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting the contents of the
main menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the dis‐
played contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the status
field.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
sage is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐
sages are displayed as long as they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE
General settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
ity.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
Seite 55
General settings
AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the dele‐
tion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible apps via
iDrive.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Function Connec‐
tion type
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet hot‐
spot.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE
General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 62, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 57.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be activated
prior to pairing.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact pic‐
tures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device will
be used:
Seite 57
General settings
AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of
the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 61.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 58.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from
the device list on the mobile phone and start
a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for
mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
vice.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone func‐
tion.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE
General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on
the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charg‐
ing tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate USB
port that is automatically connected when a
compatible mobile phone is inserted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer
to page 82.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 62.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
that every device is operable on the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
face if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 57, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 212.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 61.
Seite 59
General settings
AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the Inter‐
net hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
hotspot
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐
lect network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet hot‐
spot, data volume must be purchased from a
service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased from
the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
ces.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐
work name:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 57.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE
General settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 57.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 61.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW Driv‐
er's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, and Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
tooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
the ignition is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired or connected with the vehicle
are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
"Apple CarPlay"
Seite 61
General settings
AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 62.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
Deleting the device
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐
cle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is main‐
tained up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates.
Updates and related current information is availa‐
ble at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE
General settings
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional informa‐
tion.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 212.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10.Wait for the update to complete.
11.Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 63
General settings
AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
You can use various media formats to call up the
content in the Owner's Manual. The following
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 64.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 64.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app, refer to page 65.
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 66.
There are different features, refer to page 67,
in each of the different media formats.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition
to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the owner's
manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and
the Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last dis‐
played function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 47, and called up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired programmable mem‐
ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
BMW Driver's Guide app
Concept
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
General information
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the In‐
ternet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Entering the vehicle identification number filters
the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
ous vehicles in the app.
It is also possible to test the app using a demon‐
stration vehicle.
Seite 65
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Operating systems and language
The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐
erating systems.
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device.
Online Owner's Manual
Concept
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in
any of today's browsers.
General information
The Online Owner's Manual is available in many
countries. An account on the customer portal
may be required.
Entering the vehicle identification number filters
the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store several individual Owner's
Manuals for various vehicles.
Language
The language is based on whichever language is
set in the operating system.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Additional information on availability, refer to
page 67.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides information
on how to operate the vehicle, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown.
Search by illustrations
Based on illustrations, image search provides in‐
formation and descriptions. This is helpful when
the terminology for a feature is not at hand.
Frequently asked questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
links to additional information.
Quick links
The chapter on quick links explains the most im‐
portant information and operating instructions on
the basis of various situations.
Smart Scan
You can use Smart Scan to scan various symbols
in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of the
symbol in question appears, it is then possible to
display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐
ing system.
Keyword search
You can use keywords to search for information
and descriptions in the media.
Seite 66
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. X X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
Seite 67
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................... 91
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 102
Driving ....................................................................................................... 107
Displays ..................................................................................................... 129
Lights ......................................................................................................... 145
Safety ........................................................................................................ 150
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 171
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 177
Climate control ......................................................................................... 197
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 206
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 217
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 72.
You may set the button functions, depending on
the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐
tings, refer to page 84.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every re‐
mote control. Driver profile, refer to page 82.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 271.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3 Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 84,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button of the remote control again
to unlock the other vehicle access points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be activated
in the settings, refer to page 84.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer
to page 82, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 84.
▷ The interior lights, refer to page 149, are
switched on, unless they were manually
switched off.
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light
and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 146, are switched on.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
Pressing and holding the button on the remote
control opens the windows and the glass sun‐
roof.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and
the horn. This function must be activated in
the settings, refer to page 84.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched on.
If the engine or ignition is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
With Comfort Access:
convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold this button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
Seite 71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Switching on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior lights
were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
Adjusting the settings, refer to page 84.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the remote
control, refer to page 74.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote con‐
trol until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 72.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a different
location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 74.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
It is not possible to start the engine if the remote
control has not been detected.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Seite 73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the remote control with its back against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated key.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1.
Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition, if
needed, through emergency detection of the re‐
mote control, refer to page 73.
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle above
the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
er's or front passenger door, arrow, with your fin‐
ger and hold it there without grasping the door
handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof close. The exterior mirrors fold in, de‐
pending on the model.
Opening the tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
With automatic tailgate
operation: opening and closing
the tailgate with no-touch
activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐
gate is opened or closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by
an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
must be activated in the settings.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
Settings
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Open by foot movement"
Contactless opening of the tailgate is
switched on or off.
▷ "Close by foot movement"
Contactless closing of the tailgate is
switched on or off.
Performing the foot movement
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the opening, the hazard warning system
flashes.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
close the tailgate.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
re-open the tailgate.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 72.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 74.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
Adjusting the settings, refer to page 84.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
Without automatic tailgate
operation
Opening from the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. Unlocking with the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 72.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upwards.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upwards twice in quick succession.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
upward.
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Closing
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
With automatic tailgate
operation
Opening
General information
When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐
not be opened with the remote control or with
the button in the car's interior.
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure that
there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above
the tailgate.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height.
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 72.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐
tomatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
Pull button in the storage compartment
of the driver's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upwards twice in quick succession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐
tomatically to the adjusted opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the stor‐
age compartment. Pulling again continues
the opening motion.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
From the inside
Press button in the storage compartment
of the driver's door and keep it pressed.
The remote control must be located in the car's
interior for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
gate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
▷ By releasing the button in the storage com‐
partment of the driver's door. Pulling again
and holding continues the closing motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐
age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a
slow and smooth motion.
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
only. Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐
signed.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control,
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are
automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if
the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a
person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored
in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available that
is not assigned to any remote control. It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐
ing wheel position where applicable.
Both the positions saved via the seat memory
and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐
ent driver profile may be activated. This allows
you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
mote control.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the
remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐
ferent remote control, this driver profile will
apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that are
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐
files.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
are reset to their factory settings.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 59.
▷ Online.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during
start
The driver profiles can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or
her own remote control, but another person
is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside
of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 82, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates the cur‐
rent setting.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or
opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or
opened and the doors unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
The vehicle must be unlocked before the
tailgate can be used with the remote con‐
trol.
▷ "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate via the
remote control.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
ing by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the
horn.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is opened
after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or
the tailgate.
Seite 85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Switching on/off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
system will also switch on or off at the same
time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 87.
Opening the tailgate with the
alarm system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior
mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
When the still open access points are closed,
interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til the engine ignition is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked after
refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, refer
to page 73.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on your
person, grasp the door handle on the driver's
or front passenger door completely.
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
windows are automatically closed except a gap.
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Seite 87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
to page 71.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 76.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, for instance from open‐
ing and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
the ignition is switched on.
In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐
roof is automatically closed.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Overview
Tilting up and closing the tilted
glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
separately
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held.
If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position,
the sun protection closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
tection move together. Pressing
the switch upward stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
to page 71.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 75.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
position, or it is stopped when closing from the
tilted position. The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Seite 89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without
jam protection.
Initializing after a power
interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The engine is running.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until initialization is complete.
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally, fol‐
low the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 91.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 94.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 96.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 150.
Front seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts
can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
the profile currently used. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 85, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 98.
Seite 91
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Overview
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjusting
the side wings of the backrest.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width increases.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each temperature
level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 232,
the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Second row of seats
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding down
the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the center armrest is clear during folding down.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
driving may occur due to unintentional unlock‐
ing of the rear backrests by the straps. There is
a risk of injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
Seite 93
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Forward/backward
General information
The rear seat is divided into two parts at a ratio of
60 – 40. The left seat is connected to the middle
section.
Settings
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐
rection.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages properly.
Backrest tilt
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the back‐
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
fer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat
are intended for the persons sitting on the left
and right.
The center safety belt buckles of the rear seat
are intended for the persons sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
tective function of the middle safety belt is not
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in
the roof.
2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 1.
3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 2.
Safety belt buckles must audibly click into
place.
Seite 95
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open the
second safety belt buckle, arrow 2.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the
roofliner.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
and passenger's seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
After setting the height, move the head restraint
up or down slightly, making sure it engages
properly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
ance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Height
Settings
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Seite 97
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
After setting the height, move the head restraint
up or down slightly, making sure it engages
properly.
Folding down the head restraint
Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Different settings can be assigned to two mem‐
ory locations.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Ve‐
hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an
accident. Only retrieve the memory function
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Overview
Storing
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via
the remote control, the position is automatically
retrieved if the function, refer to page 85, is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 98.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the button
movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press button.
Seite 99
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
ror are used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually
dimmable
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is stationary only.
Settings
1.
Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 101
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, and
size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat, make
sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic
deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, re‐
fer to page 152.
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child restraint
systems or of child restraint systems exposed
to an accident and their fastening systems can
be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐
ciently restrained, for instance in the event of
an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have
damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐
straint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and possibly
replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Before mounting
Before mounting child restraint systems, ensure
that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position to
facilitate assembly of the child restraint system.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Seite 103
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 152.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
until the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
In some cases it may be necessary to separate
the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to
page 95.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufacturer
when installing and using LATCH child restraint
fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, 2,
of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
hicle safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
guided across sharp edges and without twist‐
ing to the upper retaining strap.
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In particular situations, for in‐
stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked.
NOTE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining strap. Seats with
an upper top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest
or the rear window shelf.
Seite 105
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the anchor
1.
Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
along both sides of the supports of the head
restraint to the anchor.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off and
starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts with the brake pedal
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐
tronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
position P, press the Start/Stop button again
without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐
tronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that the engine can still be started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
no other person sitting in the front seats.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated se‐
lector lever, refer to page 121: when switching
off the ignition, the selector lever position P is
engaged automatically if the selector lever posi‐
tion R, D or M/S is engaged.
Radio-ready state
General information
In the radio-ready state, certain power consum‐
ers remain ready for operation.
Activating
With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
button.
Seite 107
Driving
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically activates
radio-ready state when the door is opened if the
lights are switched off or the daytime running
lights are switched on.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance the ignition is automatically switched off
for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Switching off automatically
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with the en‐
gine switched off manually.
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with
the Start/Stop button.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that the engine can still be started.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The en‐
gine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
Depending on the selected driving mode, the
system is automatically activated or deactivated.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/Stop
function is active, it is available when the vehicle
is traveling faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal, en‐
gage the selector lever in position P. The engine
remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts auto‐
matically.
Seite 109
Driving
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
situations such as the following:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic en‐
gine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
3. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Seite 111
Driving
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the parking
brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐
tions, the parking brake is automatically engaged,
when selector lever position P is engaged. In
these cases, the parking brake is released auto‐
matically when you leave the selector lever posi‐
tion P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop,
the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on the ignition.
2.
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or selector
lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter goes out as soon as the parking brake
is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting position
after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly
tap the lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐
cates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Seite 113
Driving
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity
of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
antifreeze, if needed.
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched
on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
Seite 115
Driving
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its intermittent position when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐
ation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: press
down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
Seite 117
Driving
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the
LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx.
15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically acti‐
vated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity
of the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
antifreeze, if needed.
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched
on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to
its intermittent position when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Seite 119
Driving
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical po‐
sition.
4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐
ation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Driving
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐
mission with either a latching selector lever or a
tap-operated selector lever is installed.
Transmission with a latching
selector lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by moving the selector lever into the re‐
spective selector lever position. The selector
lever engages in the selector lever positions.
Transmission with a tap-operated
selector lever
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by tapping the selector lever forward or
Seite 121
Driving
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
back. The selector lever automatically returns to
the center position when released.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally, refer to page 122, in certain situations.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 124, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐
lector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle
may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a
transmission with a tap-operated selector
lever
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the ve‐
hicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to
page 107, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 107, while selector lever po‐
sition R, D or M/S is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
▷ After the ignition has been switched off while
selector lever position N is engaged.
Engaging selector lever
positions: with a latching
selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R, or P
With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
deactivated and the shift command will not be
executed.
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion P or R.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Driving
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. To release the selector lever lock: with the
brake pedal depressed, press the button on
the front of the selector lever.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired posi‐
tion.
Engaging selector lever
positions: with a tap-operated
selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
possible to change from selector lever position P
to another selector lever position.
Depending on the transmission version, the en‐
gine may have to be running too.
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly
push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Seite 123
Driving
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a latching selector lever
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle may roll.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed,
refer to page 126.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a tap-operated selector lever
1.
Start the engine while pressing on the brake
pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on,
and a Check-Control message is displayed.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when the ignition is switched off. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch
drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever po‐
sition P is automatically engaged after approx.
15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 127.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode
1.
Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is
set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the
transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This
shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1
manually or exit M.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not au‐
tomatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the
maximum speed is reached, if one of the follow‐
ing conditions is met:
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
neously activating kickdown and operating the
left shift paddles. This is not possible by switch‐
ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector
lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 125
Driving
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission
switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Releasing the transmission lock
manually: with a latching
selector lever
If the selector lever is locked in selector lever po‐
sition P despite the ignition being switched on,
the brake pedal being depressed and the button
on the selector lever being pressed, the trans‐
mission lock can be unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock manually,
set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away.
1.
Loosen the selector lever sleeve at the bot‐
tom from the center console.
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if
needed.
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit, refer to page 273, press the yel‐
low release lever downward, arrow.
4. Press the button on the front of the selector
lever and move the selector lever back
slightly.
Release the release lever.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired posi‐
tion.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Releasing the transmission lock
electronically: with a tap-
operated selector lever
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
Engaging selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
1.
Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
row 1, and press and hold the selector lever
into selector lever position N, arrow N, until
selector lever position N is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 224, period.
To start with Launch Control, point the front
wheels straight forwards.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available as soon as the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
Depending on the external temperature and driv‐
ing style, the engine and transmission require an
interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order
Seite 127
Driving
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
to reach the operating temperature needed for
Launch Control.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1.
Press the button and select SPORT
with the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster in combination with SPORT and the
DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Displays
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Messages, for instance Check Control
3 Tachometer 133
4 Current fuel consumption
5 Electronic displays
6 Fuel gauge 133
7 Reset miles 134
Seite 129
Displays
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations
and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country versions: pas‐
senger belt is not worn or objects are de‐
tected on the front passenger seat.
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt
on the driver or passenger side is not buckled.
The safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are not
working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 112.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐
ing is issued, for example when there is
the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Person warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Camera-based cruise control with
Stop&Go function, ACC, refer to page 177.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are
not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be working.
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer
braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 171.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 171, and DTC, refer
to page 173.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 158.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 153.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Seite 131
Displays
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 272.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under certain
circumstances warns if a detected lane is
left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 167.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 113.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are switched
on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight con‐
trol, refer to page 145.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 148.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 147.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 113.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
utively.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Functions
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched off.
Fuel gauge
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the
display to vary.
Follow the information on refueling.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Odometer and trip
odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Seite 133
Displays
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
▷ When the ignition is switched
off, the time, the external tem‐
perature and the odometer are
displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip od‐
ometer is reset.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
General information
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the On‐
board Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance tak‐
ing curves aggressively, the engine function
is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Displays
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Display
The current range is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Current fuel consumption
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you are
currently driving in an efficient and
environmentally-friendly manner.
Instrument cluster with
enhanced features
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you are
currently driving in an efficient and
environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Additional indicators"
Energy recovery
Display
In coasting overrun mode the ki‐
netic energy of the vehicle is con‐
verted to electrical energy. The
vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Seite 135
Displays
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and
with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
Steptronic transmission:
displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs
with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc.,
are also detected and compared with the vehi‐
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Displays
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
cle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor,
and will be displayed depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the naviga‐
tion data and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic
signs with speed limitations are detected and
displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐
played. Speed limits with extra text characters
are always displayed.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Display
General information
Speed Limit Info is permanently displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
Without a navigation system the
traffic signals are grayed out after
curves or longer stretches of
roadway.
With navigation system:
Speed Limit Info not available.
Without navigation system:
No speed limit or cancellation de‐
tected.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
Seite 137
Displays
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing can be displayed or operated using the
buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel as well as the displays in the instrument
cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting
the setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired
setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Displays
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of the
instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐
edly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information in the
Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of ar‐
rival.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance to
destination.
When destination guidance is activated in the
navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Indication in the Info Display
The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the
Info Display in the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
Onboard Computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in the
calculation of the average speed.
Seite 139
Displays
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Engine temperature display
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current
engine temperature is displayed, based on a
combination of the coolant temperature and en‐
gine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum
operating temperature has been attained, the in‐
dicator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine,
become too hot, a Check Control message is
displayed too.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 269.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed if
a destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted auto‐
matically.
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment, the estimated time of arrival
is displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system be‐
fore the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset as
often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Displays
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Sport displays
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can be
displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked
before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments
General information
On the Control Display, values for power and tor‐
que are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sports instruments"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
Vehicle state
General information
The following vehicle and environment data is
evaluated:
▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
▷ Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure.
Tire temperature and tire filling pressure are de‐
termined while driving.
Checking vehicle state
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 141
Displays
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can quickly absorb information and
concentrate on the traffic situation.
Overview
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
reached.
7. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
7. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 292.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the Flat Tire
Monitor, refer to page 158.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire
Pressure Monitor, refer to page 153.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil
level check, refer to page 265.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and can
Seite 143
Displays
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Lights
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Symbol Function
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is
switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically
switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to start the engine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 146.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 145
Lights
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance point
for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions may
be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
The low beams always stay on when the fog light
is switched on.
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Lights
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the ig‐
nition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion
.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or the use of
turn signals.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in
order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Seite 147
Lights
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 113.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if the
front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 146, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Lights
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights,
footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights
are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls
brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights
on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights
on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Selecting color scheme
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Lighting design"
6. Select the desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 149
Lights
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐
pact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐
pact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-
end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the
airbag system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Seite 151
Safety
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system
and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning light does not come on when the ig‐
nition is switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the
front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the front-
seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and
front-seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Seite 153
Safety
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and, depending on the model, the
tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further information
found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 244.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was
performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐
sure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, a reset was performed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
tive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning related
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows the
current tire inflation pressures and, depending on
the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual
values read; they may vary depending on driving
style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is com‐
pleted automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
"Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too
low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do
not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas sta‐
tion, check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Seite 155
Safety
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐
set.
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this
case, have the electronics checked and replaced
at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐
set.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
rect.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may not
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the following
situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for
instance an emergency wheel, is mounted:
have it checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
Seite 157
Safety
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, an initialization was per‐
formed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
justed.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 159
Safety
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
face.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance system. Depending on how the
vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety consists of
one or more systems that can help prevent an
imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with City light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 161.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 164.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 167.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Approach control warning
with city light braking
function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐
cident cannot be prevented, the system will help
reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
Seite 161
Safety
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The automatic braking intervention is done with
limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The approach control warning is available even if
cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there is
the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
Seite 163
Safety
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
sisted by a minor automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a
low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror
is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
sion with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Safety
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedestrians
starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before
a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 165
Safety
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a
low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave
the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system
issues a warning at speeds between
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this speed,
a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may
vary depending on the current driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Seite 167
Safety
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Yellow symbol: system is activated.
▷ Green symbol: at least one lane mark‐
ing was detected and warnings can
be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.
If the turn signal is switched on before changing
the lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐
ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk
of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
Seite 169
Safety
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommenda‐
tion to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an in‐
correct warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
vention by the driver in certain situations. This
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
consequences thereof.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain
situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pressure
applied when stepping on the brake pedal must
be higher than the braking pressure achieved by
the automatic braking function. This interrupts
automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for example for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
matically.
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Automatic Differential
Brake
The system controls the driving force by auto‐
matic braking intervention on individual wheels.
The function corresponds to a differential lock:
the system detects if a wheel begins to spin, be‐
cause of loose road surface, for instance and au‐
tomatically brakes it.
The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
better traction.
As a result, the engine force is transferred more
efficiently to the wheels during accelerations.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by applying brakes to the indi‐
vidual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 173, is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.
Seite 171
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC
Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehi‐
cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control further optimizes traction
and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive
system variably distributes the drive forces to the
front and rear axles as demanded by the driving
situation and road surface.
HDC Hill Descent Control
Concept
Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control
feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep
downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐
paved roads.
When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
the speed set by the driver, without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
While HTC is controlling the speed, the system
automatically distributes the braking force to the
individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐
ity and stability. If necessary, the Antilock Brake
System prevents the wheels from locking.
General information
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
physical limits.
Seite 173
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
HDC
Activating HDC
Press button. The LED above the button
lights up.
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐
sired speed.
Display in the instrument cluster
A symbol and the selected de‐
sired speed are displayed.
▷ Green display: HDC is active,
the system is reducing the ve‐
hicle speed.
▷ Orange display: HDC is on standby.
Display in the Head-up Display
The HDC status can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Using the cruise control rocker
switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐
creases gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
speed increases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed re‐
duces gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
speed reduces while the rocker switch is
pressed.
Using the brake pedal
While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐
sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again. The LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Servotronic
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐
ing function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher ones.
This makes it easier to park, for instance, and
makes steering more direct when driving at
faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts according
to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty
feel or a comfortable steering response is con‐
veyed.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune
the vehicle's settings and features. Various pro‐
grams can be selected for this purpose.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Button Program
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the steering and
drivetrain for greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT
driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
Concept
For balanced tuning.
Seite 175
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO, refer to page 232, provides consis‐
tent tuning to maximize range.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs. De‐
pending on your vehicle's optional
features, the list in the instrument
cluster can differ from the illustra‐
tion shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is
used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Camera-based cruise
control with Stop&Go
function, ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐
ates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
the system is able to detect this within the given
system limits.
General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect
vehicles driving ahead.
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Seite 177
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 178.
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 179.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 178.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 180.
Reduce distance, refer to page 180.
Button Function
Increase distance, refer to page 180.
Rocker switch.
Set speed, refer to page 179.
Camera
A camera in the area of the interior mirror serves
to detect vehicles.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The desired speed can be set between
20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
still.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipi‐
tation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds
when the vehicle has been braked to a stop
by the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 181.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by press‐
ing a button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Seite 179
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware
to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
Without Traffic Jam Assist: reducing
distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The instrument cluster displays the set
distance.
Without Traffic Jam Assist:
increasing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
The instrument cluster displays the set
distance.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and
distance
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted. Cruise control is continued with
the stored values. The selected speed is briefly
displayed in the Info Display.
Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Adjust the desired speed
to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.
Switching distance control off
Distance control can be switched off and on
when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button, or
Press and hold this button.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
To switch distance control back on, press button
again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐
tem is active, the marking indi‐
cates the desired speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the marking
indicates the stored speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown.
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance display
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after the
system is switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has
driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate
ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal
or pressing the RES CNCL button or the rocker
switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
You are prompted to intervene by brak‐
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal is
being pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Seite 181
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained on
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
Seite 183
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 184.
Store speed, refer to page 185.
Button Function
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 184.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 185.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 185.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐
onds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the current
speed.
Seite 184
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 186.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Seite 185
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator light in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐
tem is active, the marking indi‐
cates the desired speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the marking
indicates the stored speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
switched off.
Status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
gine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐
tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is
equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the
vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are
approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones
and a display on the Control Display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the following
situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐
ject.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Seite 186
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obstacles
are detected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on
the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 187
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone
sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an
alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐
trol (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
Seite 188
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone
alternating between the front and rear speakers.
As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
sound sources is no longer present, the system
is again fully functional.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Seite 189
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Overview
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer
power socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐
hicle equipment.
Seite 190
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Parking using pathway and
turning radius lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the turning radius
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Seite 191
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking parallel
to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering dur‐
ing the parking procedure.
The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
Park Distance Control. Also follow the safety in‐
formation for PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Seite 192
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Also follow the safety information for PDC Park
Distance Control.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min. length
of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must
be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Seite 193
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
To activate:
"Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking space
search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is
active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has been
taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking
assistant
1.
Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the park‐
ing assistant, refer to page 193. Activate the
parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed, refer
to page 194, on the Control Display.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will come
after gear change on the stationary vehicle -
wait for the automatic steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indicated
on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
▷ Press park assistance button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
instruction on the display.
Seite 194
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
ued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 193, and follow the instructions on the dis‐
play.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
Seite 195
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on the
tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 196
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by
an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a
climate-control system for regulating tempera‐
ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic cli‐
mate control with automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings
2 Air conditioning
3 Air flow
4 Air flow display
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 Temperature
7 Seat heating, right 93
8 Rear window defroster
Seite 197
Climate control
CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
9 Seat heating, left 93
Climate control functions in
detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the
control switches off.
Temperature
Concept
The system heats or cools, depending on the set
temperature.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
ter, refer to page 227, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of
outside air into the vehicle is permanently
blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
ging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Seite 198
CONTROLS
Climate control
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest
level is active when seven LEDs are lit.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Operation
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
dows and remove condensation:
▷ Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
The rear window defroster can only be activated
continuously at an external temperature below
approx. 23 ℉/–5 ℃.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the microfil‐
ter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 271.
Seite 199
Climate control
CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Automatic climate control
1 Defrosting windows and removing condensa‐
tion
2 Temperature, left
3 AUTO program
4 Switching off the system
5 Air flow, AUTO intensity
6 Display
7 SYNC program
8 Maximum cooling
9 Temperature, right
10 Air conditioning
11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
12 Seat heating, right 93
13 Air distribution settings
14 Seat heating, left 93
15 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
16 Rear window defroster
Climate control functions in
detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press button.
Seite 200
CONTROLS
Climate control
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
by using the maximum cooling or heating power,
and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control reaches this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, if needed, by in‐
creasing the cooling or heating output, and then
keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automatically
with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 227, develops
and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
mal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available above an external tem‐
perature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the en‐
gine running.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
trolled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Seite 201
Climate control
CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The air conditioning, refer to page 201, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐
trol for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
ging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside
air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐
ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
Recirculated-air mode switches off automatically
at low external temperatures after a certain
amount of time in order to avoid window fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐
circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button
to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure
that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
Seite 202
CONTROLS
Climate control
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
SYNC program
Concept
The system enables the transfer of current set‐
tings on the driver's side for temperature, air
flow, air distribution, and the AUTO program to
the front passenger side and to the left and right
rear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The current setting of the temperature
on the driver's side is transferred to the front
passenger side.
The program is switched off if the setting on the
front passenger side is changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
For permanent activation, press the button for
longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
button again.
The rear window defroster can only be activated
continuously at an external temperature below
approx. 23 ℉/–5 ℃.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the microfil‐
ter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and
gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 271.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
Seite 203
Climate control
CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Settings
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when car's inte‐
rior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's in‐
terior and lowers its temperature, if needed.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
and off directly or by using two preset activation
times. The system remains switched on for
30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is operated via
iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
state.
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:
does not depend on external temperature.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
Seite 204
CONTROLS
Climate control
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the activation time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 205
Climate control
CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The
Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up
to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate
the remote control, the buttons on the interior
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter for the par‐
ticular system is required in order to program the
remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Seite 206
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior mirror flashes. This erases all program‐
ming of the buttons on the interior mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on
the interior mirror. The LED on the interior
mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster
indicates that the button on the interior mirror
has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mitter and repeat the step. Several more at‐
tempts at different distances may be neces‐
sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other buttons,
repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the system
to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐
tem.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror longer.
If the LED on the interior mirror starts flashing
rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 sec‐
onds, the system features a rolling code radio
system. Flashing and continuous illumination of
the LED will repeat for approximately 20 sec‐
onds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual
buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
Seite 207
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmit‐
ter for the system to be controlled approx. 1
to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but‐
tons of the interior mirror. The required dis‐
tance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐
ter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the programming starting with step 4. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror
simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds un‐
til the LED on the interior mirror flashes rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The point of the compass is displayed in the mir‐
ror when driving straight.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by pressing
the control button with a pointed object, such as
the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The
following setting options are displayed in succes‐
sion, depending on how long the control button
is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
Seite 208
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering set‐
ting.
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle
so that the compass operates correctly; refer to
World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for approx.
3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set com‐
pass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control
button quickly and repeatedly until the num‐
ber of the compass zone that corresponds
with your location appears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐
pass is ready for use again after approximately
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
event of the following:
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does not
change despite changing the direction of
travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metallic ob‐
jects or overhead power lines near the vehicle
and that there is sufficient room to drive
around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for approx.
6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the
display. Next, drive in a complete circle at
least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the
"C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
Seite 209
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for approx. 12
to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button
again to switch between English "E" and German
"O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the interior
lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Seite 210
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The cigarette lighter is located in the center con‐
sole.
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Remove the cover.
Seite 211
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 59.
Overview
The USB interface is located between the front
seats.
Connecting an external device
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
that every device is operable on the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
face if the device supports this. At higher
temperatures, the USB storage device may
cause a reduction in the charging current.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
Seite 212
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Non-compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
General information
The cargo cover is in two parts. This can be re‐
moved to load bulky luggage.
Removing
Rear cover
1.
Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate.
2. Pry cover up a bit, arrow 1, and pull out of the
brackets toward the back, arrow 2.
Front cover
1.
Push cover out of the bracket upward on
both sides, arrow 1.
2. Pull cover out of the bracket toward the rear
on both sides, arrow 2.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
their respective holders.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cargo
area can be enlarged as follows:
▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into an
upright loading position using the cargo set‐
ting.
Seite 213
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–
20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the
center section can be folded down separately.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down from the rear
or from the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown into the car's interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
driving may occur due to unintentional unlock‐
ing of the rear backrests by the straps. There is
a risk of injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
tective function of the middle safety belt is not
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
NOTE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head
restraint is clear when folding down.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the rear
Pull the strap forward. The rear seat backrest
folds forward.
Seite 214
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Folding down the rear seat backrest
from the cargo area
Pull the switch inside the cargo area.
Left switch: the left and center rear seat back‐
rests fold forward.
Right switch: the right rear seat backrest folds
forward.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be separately
moved through several tilt stages into an upright
loading position.
Settings
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat back‐
rest as required.
3. Latch the rear seat backrest.
Fold back the backrest
Without a cargo position:
1. Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.
With a cargo position:
1.
Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The rear
seat backrest first engages in the loading po‐
sition.
3. Pull the strap again.
4. Fold rear seat backrest all the way back.
5. Latch the rear seat backrest.
Seite 215
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Cargo area partition net
Cargo area partition net, large
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, in‐
stall the large cargo area partition net behind the
front seats.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
page 213.
2. Open the lids above on the roof frame until
they engage.
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of
the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐
cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and
push them forward.
4. Hook the lower three hooks of the cargo area
partition net into the three eyes of the folded
down rear backrest, arrow 2, raising the back‐
rests slightly, if needed.
Make sure that the lower hooks are hooked
into the eyes from behind.
Cargo area partition net, small
With upright rear backrests, install the small
cargo area partition net behind the second row of
seats.
1.
Remove the cargo cover.
2. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of
the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐
cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and
push them forward.
3. Use the two lower hooks to hook the cargo
area partition net into the upper eyes in the
cargo area, arrow 2.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Seite 216
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments in
the car's interior
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Storage compartment up front in the center
console, refer to page 217.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 218.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer
to page 218.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 218.
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
refer to page 218.
▷ Cup holder, refer to page 219.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐
sole, refer to page 219.
▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 220
▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area, re‐
fer to page 220.
▷ Additional storage compartments in the car's
interior, refer to page 220
Storage compartment up
front in the center console
There is a storage compartment under the cover.
Seite 217
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Center armrest
Front
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Seite 218
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Opening
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and fold the center arm‐
rest up, arrow 2.
Settings
The center armrest can be adjusted in several tilt
settings.
Storage compartment in
the rear center console
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot
beverages can damage the cup holder and in‐
crease the risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and
sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever‐
ages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.
Front
Two cup holders are located under the cover.
Rear
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
other.
Seite 219
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Additional storage
compartments in the car's
interior
Storage compartment under the
driver's seat
Storage compartment for small objects.
Nets on the backrests of the
front seats
The nets on the backrests of the front seats can
also be used to store small parts.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
Storage compartments in
the cargo area
Side storage compartments, left
and right
Storage compartments are located on the right
and left sides.
Net for storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of right
storage compartment.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Seite 220
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
A multi-function hook is located on each side of
the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 229, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage space under cargo floor
panel
The cargo floor panel can be folded. To open the
cargo floor panel, lift slightly and push toward the
front.
Seite 221
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 224
Loading ..................................................................................................... 228
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 231
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary.
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐
spective parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ces.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Seite 224
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities.
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐
mentum.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on
unpaved terrain.
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before start‐
ing a trip; do not take risks while driving.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road
surface, the slower the speed should be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near
the MAX mark.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
tact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐
hicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to the
wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol if available.
After a trip on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
heavy soiling from the body.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
Seite 225
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
gas system.
Mobile communication devices
in the vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active
mode.
Objects in the movement area
around pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Seite 226
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking force boost and steering
assistance, are restricted or not available at all.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state or with the engine switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
Seite 227
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Loading
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight.
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
driving may occur due to unintentional unlock‐
ing of the rear backrests by the straps. There is
a risk of injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
Seite 228
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing
cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the backrests to stow
cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net, refer to
page 216, to protect occupants. Make sure
that objects cannot penetrate the cargo area
partition net.
▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Only use the lower lashing eyes to secure the
cargo with the cargo area partition net.
Roof-mounted luggage
rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Seite 229
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Seite 230
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emission
values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental
impact.
Remove unnecessary
cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which are
no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and
glass sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
results in increased air resistance and thereby re‐
duces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 231
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐
cator, refer to page 136.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine
during longer stops
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐
matically switches off the engine during a stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
Switch off any functions
that are not currently
needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and reduce
the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traf‐
fic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 271.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort features, for instance the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are dis‐
played to assist with an optimized fuel consump‐
tion driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in the
instrument cluster as bonus range.
Seite 232
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 234.
▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to
page 234.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 233.
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 235.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 236.
Overview
Driving Dynamics Control
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
The following functions can be activated/deacti‐
vated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐
rior more slowly, to economize on fuel consump‐
tion.
In addition, the power output to the seat and mir‐
ror heating is reduced.
Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
the engine and coasting with the engine idling.
Deactivate the function to use the braking effect
of the engine when traveling downhill.
Seite 233
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
ECO PRO potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current settings
in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
A modified driving style helps you
extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
ECO PRO efficiency display
The color of the ECO PRO displays in the instru‐
ment cluster tell you how efficiently you are driv‐
ing:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style.
▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for example
by backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all con‐
ditions for driving with optimized fuel efficiency
are met.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
ECO PRO displays also inform you about your
current driving style. This is indicated by a
pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer
tells you whether energy is being consumed to
accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is being
recovered through coasting or braking. If the
pointer remains in the blue range on the scale,
you are driving efficiently.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
The ECO PRO tip indicates that your
driving style can be modified to be more
fuel efficient, for example by backing off
the accelerator.
Activating/deactivating the display
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "ECO PRO info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission:
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
manual shift interventions.
Indications on the Control
Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO functions
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Seite 234
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average consumption can be displayed on
the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
Vertical bars show consumption for the selected
time frame.
Adjusting the fuel consumption
history time frame
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
5.
Press button.
6. Adjust the time frame.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
5.
Press button.
6. "Reset consumption history"
Coasting
Concept
This function helps to save fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine is
automatically decoupled from the transmission
when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle
continues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D
remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal not de‐
pressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
▷ With a camera in the area of the interior mir‐
ror: the system does not detect any vehicles
ahead of you.
▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system
does not detect any obstructive traffic situa‐
tions or routes.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Seite 235
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
shift paddle again.
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer shows the idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the
zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting mode is displayed in
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown
in the fuel consumption history. The counter is
reset prior to every departure.
Displaying EfficientDynamics information
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
4. Select the symbol.
System limits
The function is not available if one of the follow‐
ing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily too
low.
▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐
cessive current.
Driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adopting an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
Seite 236
DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup
table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient your driving style, the
smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐
cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
fuel, refer to page 231.
Seite 237
Saving fuel
DRIVING TIPS
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 240
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 242
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 244
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 262
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 265
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 269
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 271
Replacing components .......................................................................... 273
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 283
Care ........................................................................................................... 289
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Refueling
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 242, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Refueling
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 241
Refueling
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Fuel
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %,
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the cata‐
lytic converter is permanently damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or
add the following in the case of gasoline en‐
gines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Fuel
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Seite 243
Fuel
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics
influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Driving dynamics.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 245, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation
pressure specifications in the tire
inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
Seite 244
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
correct it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 244, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 245, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up
to 100 mph/160 km/h
sDrive28i, xDrive28i
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18
95 W RSC
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S
RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/45 R 19
92 W RSC
2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
Emergency
wheel:
T 135/90 R 17
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 246, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 245
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Tire inflation pressure values
over 100 mph/160 km/h
sDrive28i, xDrive28i
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S
RSC
225/50 R 18
95 W RSC
2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
225/45 R 19
92 W RSC
2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
Emergency
wheel:
T 135/90 R 17
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S
RSC
225/50 R 18
95 W RSC
2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
225/45 R 19
92 W RSC
3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
Emergency
wheel:
T 135/90 R 17
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver’s door pillar.
Seite 246
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0118
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0118: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0118 1st week, 2018
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Seite 247
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required min‐
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tor.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
Seite 248
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐
pected while driving, immediately reduce speed
and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For
this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or
transported as needed. Do not repair damaged
tires, but have them replaced.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an accident. To
maintain good handling and vehicle response,
use only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer
of the vehicle recommends that you use
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
type. Following tire damage, have the original
wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐
cle as soon as possible.
Seite 249
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own
safety you should replace them only with the
same kind. No spare tire is available in the case
of a flat tire. Further information is available from
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct, if needed.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Seite 250
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving with
a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
tire.
Seite 251
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM
wheel electronics replaced at the next oppor‐
tunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the cargo
floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Filling
1.
Shake the sealant container.
Seite 252
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐
gages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
6. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill
the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1.
Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
Seite 253
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
5. With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
not be reached, contact your dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1.
Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 254
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
side the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ig‐
nition switched on or the engine running,
switch on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the button
on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System at the next opportu‐
nity.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.
WARNING
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐
ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to
the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting
snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect
readings.
Seite 255
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow
chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.
Seite 256
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against
rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐
ple a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is
diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to
change.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Seite 257
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Seite 258
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,
and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your
other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐
cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire sur‐
face of the jack is in contact with the ground
and the wheel in question is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground.
Seite 259
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1.
Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Emergency wheel
Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended
for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
has been replaced.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
correct it as needed.
Safety information
WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐
sions. When driving with an emergency wheel,
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an
accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Removing the emergency wheel
1.
Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel.
2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
Seite 260
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the
trailer hitch.
5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder
on the left next to the emergency wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and re‐
move it.
Inserting the emergency wheel
1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left and
slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the
trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the
tool holder on the left next to the emergency
wheel.
6. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Seite 261
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
6 Coolant reservoir
Seite 262
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐
sonal and property damage. The manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort
to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐
partment be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
ing components. Certain components in the
engine compartment can also move with the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Stop immediately and correctly close
the hood.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
NOTE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
ically. Avoid pressing again.
Opening the hood
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Seite 263
Engine compartment
MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 264
MOBILITY
Engine compartment
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Engine oil
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Seite 265
Engine oil
MOBILITY
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case,
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
ature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
be added is indicated in the message displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 267.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition
before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
Seite 266
MOBILITY
Engine oil
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 262.
Adding engine oil
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 263.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
Seite 267
Engine oil
MOBILITY
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
Seite 268
MOBILITY
Engine oil
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Coolant
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
system with the engine cooled down.
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
Coolant level
Concept
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
side of the engine compartment.
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the cool‐
ant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
Seite 269
Coolant
MOBILITY
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close the cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 270
MOBILITY
Coolant
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Maintenance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 135, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote
control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐
er’s service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
Seite 271
Maintenance
MOBILITY
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular
maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected at the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Seite 272
MOBILITY
Maintenance
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Replacing components
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, move the wipers
into their fold-away position, refer to
page 116.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the wiper
blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of
removal until it locks in place.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 273
Replacing components
MOBILITY
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Replacing the rear wiper blade
1. Lift the wiper up fully and pull off the wiper
blade, arrow.
2. Position the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into place.
3. Fold the wipers in.
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have the relevant work carried out a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact
with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk
of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lights in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new
bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth
or something similar, or hold the bulb by its
base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driv‐
ing with the lights switched on, the condensation
evaporates after a short time. The headlight
glass does not need to be changed.
Seite 274
MOBILITY
Replacing components
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight ad‐
justment was changed, have it checked and, if
necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Halogen headlights
Overview
1 High beams, headlight flasher
2 Low beams
3 Side marker lights
4 Turn signal
5 Parking lights / daytime running lights.
6 Parking lights / daytime running lights.
Parking lights, daytime running lights
The parking lights and daytime running lights are
made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Accessing the turn signals, low beams,
high beams/headlight flasher
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Open the hood, refer to page 263.
Turn signal
Bulb A2357
1. Access to the turn signal on the right side:
unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in reverse
order of removal.
Low beams
55 watt bulb, H7LL.
1.
Access to the low beams on the right side:
unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
Seite 275
Replacing components
MOBILITY
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐
row 1, and remove.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐
rectly positioned in the headlight housing and
the bulb holder perceptibly engages.
6. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
High beams/headlight flasher
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐
row 1, and remove.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
4. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐
rectly positioned in the headlight housing and
the bulb holder perceptibly engages.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
Seite 276
MOBILITY
Replacing components
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
LED headlights
Overview
Front lights
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Side marker lights
3 Turn signal
4 Low beams, high beams/headlight flasher
5 Cornering light
Front lights
The following lights feature LED technology:
▷ High beams
▷ Parking lights / daytime running lights
▷ Low beams
▷ Cornering light
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Turn signal
Bulb A2357
Accessing the turn signals
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Open the hood.
1.
Access to the turn signal on the right side:
unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in reverse
order of removal.
Halogen front fog lights
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Seite 277
Replacing components
MOBILITY
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip, ar‐
row 1.
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.
3. Remove the front fog light toward the front.
4. Detach the connector.
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb and replace it.
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front
fog light. Note the guide rails in doing so.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Vehicles with halogen headlights
1 Side marker lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing light
4 Inside brake light
5 Tail lights
6 Brake lights/tail lights
Vehicles featuring LED headlights
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing light
3 Inside brake light
4 Tail lights
5 Brake light
The tail lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 278
MOBILITY
Replacing components
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights
General information
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake light: 21 watt bulb, P21WLL.
Removing the exterior tail light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the fastening using the screw driver
from the onboard vehicle tool kit, arrow 1.
Remove cover, arrow 2.
3. Loosen both nuts, arrow 1, of the outer tail
light. Use the handle of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen.
Carefully pull out the tail light from the body
toward the front, arrow 2. Ensure that the wir‐
ing is not damaged.
4. Pull the plug out of the bulb holder and have
the tail light wiring hang outside.
Replacing the bulbs
1.
Loosen the three fasteners, arrow 1, on the
bulb holder.
Remove the bulb holder from the tail light, ar‐
row 2.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Upper bulb: turn signal.
▷ Lower bulb: brake light.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail light
1.
Connect the plug and mount the wiring on
the tail light, arrow 1.
2. Place the tail light with the tab, arrow 2, on
the anchor of the body and push onto both of
the threaded bolt.
3. Press on the tail lights until flush and tighten
both of the nuts.
4. Mount the cover. Make sure that the plastic
tabs of the cover are correctly seated in the
corresponding recesses of the body.
Seite 279
Replacing components
MOBILITY
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Lights in the tailgate
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL
Inner brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL
Tail light: 5-watt bulb, P21WLL
Vehicles featuring LED headlights
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL
Inner brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL
Accessing the lights
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip.
3. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Replacing reversing light and inner brake
light
1.
Loosen the fasteners, arrow 1, on the bulb
holder.
Remove the bulb holder from the tail light, ar‐
row 2.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Upper bulb: reversing light
▷ Lower bulb: inner brake light
Only vehicles with halogen headlights:
▷ Lower bulb, 5-watt: tail light
Installing the bulb holder
1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Make sure that the bulb holder is correctly
and firmly seated.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
These lights are made using LED technology. In
the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐
Seite 280
MOBILITY
Replacing components
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
able without restriction and any Check Control
messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐
tures will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red
indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever position
D, R or N.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 285, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so that
it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Seite 281
Replacing components
MOBILITY
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
Seite 282
MOBILITY
Replacing components
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Move the warning triangle sideways and remove
it.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area on
the left in the storage compartment.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐
tion with the BMW Response Center.
Seite 283
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Functional requirements
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
ton.
Manual triggering
1.
Touch the cover.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
on the button illuminates green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current
position of the vehicle, if it can be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
are under voltage.
Seite 284
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
ing connection.
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the two
vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Preparation
1.
Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
formation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
sumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both ve‐
hicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.
1.
Open the cover of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
Seite 285
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Steptronic transmission without
xDrive: transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Have vehicle transported
only with lifted front axle or on a loading plat‐
form.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
Roll or push, refer to page 124, the vehicle.
Tow truck
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Steptronic transmission with
xDrive: transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
Roll or push, refer to page 124, the vehicle.
Seite 286
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
There is a risk of an accident! Make sure that
the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
Seite 287
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 273, are together in the cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 288
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Care
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood
is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 124.
Seite 289
Care
MOBILITY
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐
cle.
Start the engine. Starting the engine, refer to
page 108.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 290
MOBILITY
Care
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
nents, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly
when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
with water.
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Seite 291
Care
MOBILITY
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass
of the Head-up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Seite 292
MOBILITY
Care
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Seite 293
Care
MOBILITY
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 296
Appendix ................................................................................................... 298
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 300
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Technical data
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
urement method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
stance due to the selected special equipment,
tires, load and chassis version.
BMW X1
Width with mirrors inches/mm 81.1/2,060
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,821
Height inches/mm 62.9/1,598
Length inches/mm 175.4/4,455
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4
Seite 296
REFERENCE
Technical data
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Weights
X1 sDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,575/2,075
Load lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,282/1,035
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
X1 xDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,729/2,145
Load lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,381/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 16.1/61.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 242
Seite 297
Technical data
REFERENCE
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Driving: starting a gasoline engine, refer to
page 108.
▷ Climate control: air conditioner: rear window
defroster, refer to page 199.
▷ Climate control: automatic climate control:
rear window defroster, refer to page 203.
Seite 298
REFERENCE
Appendix
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Seite 299
Appendix
REFERENCE
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake System 171
ACC, Active Cruise Control 177
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 127
Accessories and parts 10
Activated-charcoal filter 203
Activation times, parked-car ventilation 204
Active Cruise Control, ACC 177
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐
play 169
Additives, engine oil types 267
After washing vehicle 290
Airbags 150
Airbags, indicator and warning light 151
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air
mode 198, 202
Air conditioner 197
Air conditioning 198, 201
Air, dehumidifying, see Air condition‐
ing 198, 201
Air distribution, manual 199, 202
Air flow, air conditioner 199
Air flow, automatic climate control 202
Air pressure, tires 244
Air vents, see Ventilation 203
Alarm system 85
Alarm, unintentional 87
Alertness assistant 169
All-season tires, see Winter tires 250
All-wheel-drive 173
Ambient light 149
Antifreeze, washer fluid 120
Antilock Brake System, ABS 171
Anti-slip control, see DSC 171
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 257
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 65
Approach control warning with city light braking
function 161
Approved axle load 297
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Arrival time 140
Ash tray 210
Assistance when driving off 176
AUTO intensity 202
Automatic climate control 200
Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐
tion 177
Automatic Curb Monitor 100
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
bags 152
Automatic headlight control 146
Automatic locking 85
Automatic recirculated-air control 202
Automatic tailgate 80
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 121
Automatic unlocking 85
Automatic vehicle wash 289
AUTO program, automatic climate control 201
AUTO program, intensity 202
Auto Start/Stop function 109
Auto washing 289
Average fuel consumption 139
Average speed 139
Axle loads, weights 297
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 92
Backrest, seats 91
Backrest, width 93
Bad road trips 225
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 283
Battery replacement, vehicle battery 280
Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 72
Battery, vehicle 280
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 286
Belts, safety belts 94
Seite 300
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Beverage holder, cup holder 219
Blocking, power window 88
Bluetooth connection 57
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
BMW Driver’s Guide app 65
BMW Homepage 8
BMW Internet page 8
BMW maintenance system 271
Bonus range, ECO PRO 234
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 219
Brake assistant 171
Brake discs, break-in 224
Brake force display 169
Brake lights, brake force display 169
Brake pads, break-in 224
Braking, information 226
Breakdown assistance 283
Break-in 224
Brightness of Control Display 54
Bulb replacement 274
Bulb replacement, front 275
Bulb replacement, rear 278
Bulbs and lights 274
Button, Start/Stop 107
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 284
C
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 10
Calling up mirror adjustment 85
Calling up seat adjustment 85
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 160
Camera-based cruise control, ACC 177
Camera lenses, care 292
Camera, rearview camera 190
Can holder, see Cup holder 219
Care, displays 292
Care, vehicle 290
Care, washing the vehicle 289
Cargo 228
Cargo area 213
Cargo area, enlarging 213
Cargo area, loading 229
Cargo area partition net 216
Cargo area, storage compartments 220
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 213
Cargo, stowing and securing 229
Carpet, care 292
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem 225
CBS Condition Based Service 271
Center armrest 218
Center console 38
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Display 40
Central locking system 75
Central screen, see Control Display 40
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Changing parts 273
Changing wheels 256
Changing wheels/tires 249
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
ber 14
Check Control 130
Checking the oil level electronically 265
Children, seating position 102
Children, transporting safely 102
Child restraint system 102
Child restraint system LATCH 104
Child restraint systems, mounting 103
Child safety locks 106
Child seat, mounting 103
Child seats 102
Chrome parts, care 291
Cigarette lighter 210
Cleaning, displays 292
Climate control 197, 200
Closing the tailgate with no-touch activation 77
Clothes hooks 220
Coasting 235
Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 235
Coasting with idling engine 235
Cockpit 36
Combination switch, see Turn signals 113
Seite 301
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Combination switch, see Wiper sys‐
tem 113, 117
Comfort Access 75
COMFORT program, driving dynamics 175
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 260
Compartments in the doors 218
Compass 208
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 57
Compressor 251
Computer, see Onboard Computer 138
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Condensation on windows 203
Condensation under the vehicle 227
Condition Based Service CBS 271
Confirmation signal 85
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Connecting device 56
Connecting mobile phone 56
Connecting smartphone 56
Connecting telephone 56
Connections 56
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Container for washer fluid 120
Continued driving with a flat tire 156, 160
Control Display 40
Control Display, settings 52
Controller 41, 42
Control systems, driving stability 171
Convenient closing with the remote control 71
Convenient opening with the remote control 71
Coolant 269
Cooling, maximum 201
Cooling system 269
Cornering light 147
Corrosion on brake discs 227
Cosmetic mirror 210
Coupling, see Pairing 56
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72
Cruise control 183
Cruise control, active 177
Cruise control with distance control, see Cam‐
era-based cruise control, ACC 177
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 183
Cruising range 134
Cup holder 219
Current fuel consumption 135
D
Damage, tires 248
Data memory 11
Data protection, settings 55
Data, technical 296
Date 53
Date display 134
Daytime running lights 147
DCC, see Cruise control 183
Defrosting, see Defrosting the windows 199
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 203
Defrosting the windows 199
Dehumidifying, air 198, 201
Deleting personal data 55
Deletion of personal data 55
Destination distance 140
Device list 56
Digital clock 134
Digital compass 208
Dimensions 296
Dimmable exterior mirrors 100
Dimmable interior mirror 100
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 113
Display, engine temperature 140
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 148
Displays, care 292
Disposal, coolant 270
Disposal, vehicle battery 281
Distance control, see PDC 186
Distance to destination 140
Divided screen view, split screen 46
Door key, see Remote control 74
Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 173
Drive-off assistant 176
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 171
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 160
Driver profiles 82
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 83
Seite 302
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Driver profiles, importing profiles 83
Driver’s Guide app, see BMW Driver’s Guide
app 65
Driving Dynamics Control 175
Driving Excitement, SPORT 141
Driving instructions, break-in 224
Driving instructions, ECO PRO 234
Driving mode 175
Driving notes, general 225
Driving on bad roads 225
Driving on racetracks 227
Driving stability control systems 171
Driving style analysis 236
Driving tips 225
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 171
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 173
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 171
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 173
E
ECO PRO 232
ECO PRO bonus range 234
ECO PRO display 232
ECO PRO driving mode 232
ECO PRO driving style analysis 236
ECO PRO mode 232
ECO PRO program, driving dynamics 176
ECO PRO tips 234
Efficiency display, ECO PRO 234
Efficient driving 234
EfficientDynamics information 234
Electronic oil measurement 265
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 171
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 241
Emergency Request 283
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 127
Emergency wheel 260
Energy Control 135
Energy recovery 135
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 109
Engine, automatic switch-off 109
Engine compartment 262
Engine compartment, working in 263
Engine coolant 269
Engine idling when driving, coasting 235
Engine oil 265
Engine oil, adding 266
Engine oil change 268
Engine oil filler neck 266
Engine oil types to add 267
Engine start, jump-starting 284
Engine start, see Starting the engine 108
Engine stop 109
Engine temperature, display 140
Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 8
Entering a vehicle wash 289
Equipment, interior 206
Error displays, see Check Control 130
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 171
Exchanging wheels/tires 249
Exhaust gas system 225
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 225
Exiting a vehicle wash 289
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 100
Exterior mirrors 99
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 99
External start 284
External temperature display 134
External temperature warning 134
F
Failure message, see Check Control 130
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 87
Fan, see Air flow 199, 202
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 94
Filler neck for engine oil 266
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Fine wood, care 291
Seite 303
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
First-aid kit 283
Flat tire, changing wheels 256
Flat tire message, FTM 159
Flat tire message, TPM 155
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158
Flat tire, repairing 251
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153
Flat tire warning light, FTM 159
Flat tire warning light, TPM 155
Flooding 226
Floor carpet, care 292
Floor mats, care 292
Fogged up windows 199
Fold-away position, wiper 116, 119
Fold back rear seat backrests 213
Foot brake 226
For Your Own Safety 10
Front airbags 150
Front fog lights 148
Front fog lights, halogen, bulb replacement 277
Front lights 275
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
vation 152
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 153
Front seats 91
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 158
Fuel 242
Fuel cap 240
Fuel consumption history 234
Fuel consumption, see Average fuel consump‐
tion 139
Fuel filler flap 240
Fuel gauge 133
Fuel quality 242
Fuel recommendation 242
Fuel, tank capacity 297
Fuse 281
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 206
Gasoline 242
Gear shift indicator 136
General driving notes 225
General settings 52
Glare shield 210
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 90
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sunroof 88
Glove compartment 218
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 53
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Gross vehicle weight, approved 297
H
Halogen headlights 275
Handbrake, see Parking brake 111
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 207
Hands-free kit, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Hazard warning flashers 283
HDC Hill Descent Control 173
Head airbags 150
Headlight control, automatic 146
Headlight courtesy delay feature 146
Headlight flasher 113
Headlight flasher, bulb replacement 276
Headlight glass 274
Headlights 275
Headlights, care 290
Head restraints, front 96
Head restraints, rear 97
Head-up Display 142
Head-up Display, care 292
Head-up Display, see Memory function 98
Heated steering wheel 101
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 229
High-beam Assistant 147
High beams 113
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 147
High beams, bulb replacement 276
Hill Descent Control HDC 173
Hills 227
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 176
Holder for beverages 219
Homepage 8
Hood 263
Horn 36
Hot exhaust gas system 225
Seite 304
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
HUD Head-up Display 142
Hydroplaning 226
I
Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐
ing 134
Icy roads, see External temperature warning 134
Identification marks, tires 246
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 14
iDrive 40
Ignition key, see Remote control 74
Ignition off 107
Ignition on 107
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
trol 130
Indicator light, see Check Control 130
Individual air distribution 199, 202
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 82
Inductive charging, see Wireless charging, see
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 8
Inflation pressure, tires 244
Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 158
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 138
Information 8
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158
Instrument cluster 129
Instrument lighting 148
Integrated key 74
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 64
Intelligent emergency call 283
Intelligent Safety 160
Intended use 10
Intensity, AUTO program 202
Interior equipment 206
Interior lights 149
Interior lights during unlocking 71
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72
Interior mirror 99
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 100
Interior mirror, compass 208
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 100
Interior motion sensor 87
Internet connection 60
Internet hotspot 60
Internet page 8
Interval display, service requirements 135
Interval mode 114, 118
In the vicinity of the center console 38
In the vicinity of the roofliner 39
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 36
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 258
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 89
Jam protection system, windows 88
Jump-starting 284
K
Key/remote control 74
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 75
Key, see Remote control 70
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 124
Knee airbag 151
L
Label on recommended tires 250
Label, runflat tires 251
Lane departure warning 167
Lane threshold, warning 167
Language, on the Control Display 52
LATCH child restraint fixing system 104
Launch Control 127
Leather, care 290
LED headlights 277
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 274
Light 145
Light-alloy wheels, care 291
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 274
Lighter 210
Lighting 145
Light replacement 274
Light replacement, front 275
Light replacement, rear 278
Seite 305
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Lights and bulbs 274
Light switch 145
List of all messages 54
Load 229
Loading 228
Loading position 213
Location, vehicle position 53
Locking, automatic 85
Locking, settings 84
Low beams 145
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 147
Low beams, bulb replacement 275
Lower back support 92
Lug bolt lock 257
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
rack 229
Lumbar support 92
M
Maintenance 271
Maintenance requirements 271
Maintenance, service requirements 135
Maintenance system, BMW 271
Make-up mirror 210
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 130
Manual air distribution 199, 202
Manual air flow 199, 202
Manual brake, see Parking brake 111
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 241
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 187
Manual operation, rearview camera 190
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Master key, see Remote control 74
Matte finish 290
Maximum cooling 201
Maximum speed, display 136
Maximum speed, winter tires 250
Measurement, units of 53
Medical kit 283
Memory function 98
Menu in instrument cluster 138
Menus 42
Menus, operating, iDrive 40
Messages 54
Messages, see Check Control 130
Microfilter 199, 203
Minimum tread, tires 248
Mirror 99
Mirror, see Memory function 98
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
cle 226
Mobility System 251
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Moisture in headlight 274
Monitor, see Control Display 40
Mounting of child restraint systems 103
Moving sun visor 210
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 96
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 97
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 291
New wheels and tires 249
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 191
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 243
Odometer 133
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Seite 306
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Offroad trips 225
Oil 265
Oil, adding 266
Oil change 268
Oil change interval, service requirements 135
Oil filler neck 266
Oil types to add, engine 267
Old batteries, disposal 281
Onboard Computer 138
Onboard literature, printed 64
Onboard vehicle tool kit 273
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Online Owner's Manual 66
Opening and closing 70
Opening the tailgate with no-touch activation 77
Operating concept, iDrive 40
Operating via iDrive 42
Operating with the Controller 42
Operation via touchscreen 44
Optional equipment 9
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol 202
Owner's Manual media 64
Owner's Manual, printed 64
P
Paint, vehicle 290
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 86
Panic mode 86
Panoramic glass sunroof 88
Parallel parking assistant 192
Park Distance Control PDC 186
Parked-car ventilation 204
Parked vehicle, condensation 227
Parking aid, see PDC 186
Parking assistant 192
Parking brake 111
Parking lights 145
Partition net 216
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting downward 100
Pathway lines, rearview camera 191
PDC Park Distance Control 186
Performance Control 173
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 82
Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion 164
Plastic, care 291
PostCrash 170
Power failure 281
Power windows 87
Pressure, tires 244
Pressure warning FTM, tires 158
Printed onboard literature 64
Profiles, see Driver profiles 82
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 47
Protective function, glass sunroof 89
Protective function, windows 88
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 41, 42
R
Racetrack operation 227
Radiator fluid 269
Radio-operated key, see Remote control 74
Radio-operated remote control, opening/clos‐
ing 70
Radio-ready state 107
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 114, 118
Rear lights 278
Rear seats 93
Rear socket 212
Rearview camera 189
Rear window defroster 199, 203
Recirculated-air filter 203
Recirculated-air mode 198, 202
Recommended fuel grade 243
Recommended tire brands 250
Refueling 240
Remaining range 134
Remote control/key 74
Remote control, additional 73
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Remote control, loss 73
Remote control, malfunction 73
Seite 307
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Remote control, opening/closing 70
Remote control, universal 206
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Replacing parts 273
Replacing wheels/tires 249
Reporting safety malfunctions 15
RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise
control, ACC 177
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 183
Reserve warning, see Range 134
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154
Retreaded tires 250
Roadside parking lights 146
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 207
RON recommended fuel grade 243
Roofliner 39
Roof load capacity 297
Roof-mounted luggage rack 229
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat
tires 251
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Rubber components, care 291
Runflat tires 251
S
Safe braking 226
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
passenger seat 96
Safety belts 94
Safety belts, care 292
Safety locks, doors, and windows 106
Safety switch, windows 88
Safety systems, airbags 150
Saving fuel 231
Screen, see Control Display 40
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 273
Sealant 251
Seat heating, front 93
Seating position for children 102
Seat, see Memory function 98
Seats, front 91
Seats, rear 93
Securing cargo 229
Selection list in instrument cluster 138
Selector lever, see Steptronic transmission 121
Sensors, care 292
Service and warranty 11
Service requirements, Condition Based Service
CBS 271
Service requirements, display 135
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
tion 8
Servotronic 175
SET button, see Camera-based cruise control,
ACC 177
SET button, see Cruise control 183
Settings, locking/unlocking 84
Settings on the Control Display 52
Shifting, Steptronic transmission 121
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 126
Side airbags 150
Signaling, horn 36
Signals when unlocking 85
Sitting safely 91
Size 296
Ski and snowboard bag 216
Slide/tilt glass roof 88
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
SMS text message, supplementary 133
Snow chains 255
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
Sockets 211
Software update 62
SOS button 283
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 260
Speed, average 139
Speed Limit Info 136
Speed limits, display 136
Speed warning 141
Split screen 46
Sport displays 141
Seite 308
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
SPORT program, driving dynamics 175
Stability control systems 171
Standard equipment 9
Start/stop, automatic function 109
Start/Stop button 107
Starting the engine 108
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status control display, tires 154
Status information, iDrive 47
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 143
Steering assistance 175
Steering wheel, adjusting 101
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 121
Steptronic Sport transmission with double
clutch, see Steptronic transmission 121
Steptronic transmission 121
Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see
Steptronic transmission 121
Stopping the engine 109
Storage compartment in the rear 219
Storage compartments 217
Storage compartments, locations 217
Storage, tires 250
Storing the vehicle 292
Stowing and securing cargo 229
Suitable devices 57
Suitable mobile phones 57
Summer tires, tread 248
Sun visor 210
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 64
Supplementary SMS text message 133
Switch for driving dynamics 175
Switch, see Cockpit 36
Symbols 9
Symbols in the status field 47
SYNC program, automatic climate control 203
T
Tachometer 133
Tailgate, automatic 80
Tailgate, closing with no-touch activation 77
Tailgate opening 79
Tailgate, opening with no-touch activation 77
Tailgate via remote control 72
Tail lights 278
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 10
Technical data 296
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Temperature, air conditioner 198
Temperature, automatic climate control 201
Temperature display for external tempera‐
ture 134
Temperature, engine 140
Terminal, starting aid 285
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 85
Thigh support 92
Tilt alarm sensor 86
Time 52
Time of arrival 140
Tire damage 248
Tire identification marks 246
Tire inflation pressure 244
Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM 158
Tire pressure 244
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 251
Tires, changing 249
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 251
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 244
Tires, runflat 251
Tire tread 248
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 8
Tool 273
Total vehicle weight 297
Touchpad 45
Touchscreen 44
Towing 286
Tow-starting 286
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 153
Traction control 173
TRACTION, driving dynamics 173
Seite 309
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 127
Transmission lock, releasing manually 126
Transmission, Steptronic transmission 121
Transporting children safely 102
Tread, tires 248
Trip computer 140
Triple turn signal activation 113
Trip odometer 133
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 133
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 191
Turn signal, bulb replacement, halogen head‐
lights 275
Turn signal, bulb replacement, LED head‐
lights 277
Turn signals, operation 113
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 278
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
U
Unintentional alarm 87
Units of measurement 53
Universal remote control 206
Unlock button, see Steptronic transmission 121
Unlocking, automatic 85
Unlocking, settings 84
Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 225
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upholstery care 291
USB connection 59
USB interface, general information 212
USB port, see USB interface 212
Use, intended 10
Using a smartphone via voice activation 49
V
Vanity mirror 210
Vehicle battery 280
Vehicle battery, replacing 280
Vehicle, break-in 224
Vehicle care 290
Vehicle care products 290
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 14
Vehicle jack 258
Vehicle key, see Remote control 74
Vehicle paint 290
Vehicle position, vehicle location 53
Vehicle status 143
Vehicle storage 292
Vehicle wash 289
Vehicle, washing 289
Ventilation 203
Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 204
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14
Voice activation system 49
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐
trol 130
Warning displays, see Check Control 130
Warning messages, see Check Control 130
Warning triangle 283
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 120
Washer nozzles, windshield 115, 119
Washer system 113, 117
Washing the vehicle 289
Water on roads 226
Weights 297
Welcome lights 146
Welcome lights during unlocking 71
Wheel cleaner 291
Wheels, changing 249
Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 244
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153
WiFi connection 60
Window defroster, rear 199
Windows, powered 87
Windshield washer fluid 120
Windshield washer nozzles 115, 119
Windshield washer system 113, 117
Seite 310
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
system 113, 117
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 113, 117
Winter storage, care 292
Winter tires, suitable tires 250
Winter tires, tread 248
Wiper 113, 117
Wiper blades, replacing 273
Wiper fluid 120
Wiper, fold-away position 116, 119
Wiper system 113, 117
Wireless charging dock, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Wireless charging, see Wireless charging, see
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 8
Wood, care 291
Word match concept, navigation 44
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 273
X
xDrive 173
Seite 311
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
*BL2120596001*
01402120596 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized Owner's Manual as an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL2120596001*
01402120596 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18
